Panasonic RRXS350E تعليمات التشغيل

EU
EU
Pursuant to at the directive 2004/108/EC, article 9(2)
Panasonic Testing Centre
Panasonic Marketing Europe GmbH
Winsbergring 15, 22525 Hamburg, Germany
Model No.
Web Site: http://panasonic.net
© Panasonic Corporation 2012
VQT4J73_RR-XS350-cover.indd 2
NEDERLANDS
SVENSKA
POLSKI
VQT4J73_RR-XS350-cover.indd 1
VQT4J73
M0512KZ0
Hold-functie
ƆİĨâƈ ƧİñƔƈ ŎĪõħïƌ ŐùĨïƌ őĦê IJĪĤõöħïƌ IJóƖİğõïƌ IJĨùç ƩŐöûð ƛĿê ōöó
.ƎĽäŐïƌ Ƨľò Ōħê
ńðƌƨ
Œì IJóƖİğõïƌ ƤĽõöæƌ ."
" ŀðĿïƌ ńðŐó ŸIJóƖİğõïƌ IJĨùç Ɣİģñ IJïİä Œì ●
.Ŏĥħð ijíƨ ƍĿíƈ
" ŀðĿïƌ ĿĩĠó ŸIJóƖİğõïƌ IJĨùç Ɣİģñ ĽĨê ●
ŌĪĢĜá ʼníŐöóƨ "
.İƫĪŕİĤĦá IJíİğïƌ
Őï őöä ŸŏðƌĽúöæƌ ƔƌĿħïƌ ŌĪĢĜöïƌ ƩŐöùð ƨƈ IJóƖİğõïƌ IJïİä őĦê ƌƫ Ɣİħöêƌ ●
Ŏĥħħïƌ Ŏð ŸIJóƖİğõïƌ IJĨùç Ɣİģñ ıõûà IJíİğïƌ ŌĪĢĜá ơİĤóƊ ōá
Ľí Ÿŏñƈ ůƊ .ƩĿåƈ ƎĿð İĩĦĪĢĜá ōá ƌƕƊ ƎŀĪãƨ ƎĿöģï ƎĽäŐïƌ Ƨľò ƥƌĽúöæƌ
ƩŐöûð ƛİģúñƌ ıõûà ŌĪĢĜöïƌ ƆİĨâƈ įãİģð ŌĥĜà ƎĽäŐïƌ ơİĤóƊ ōöó
.IJóƖİğõïƌ IJĨùç
ƏİģĦħïƌ ơľùà ƥİĪĤïƌ ĽĨê IJóƖİğõïƌ IJĨùç Ŏð ŎĪġð ƩŐöûð ĿìŐá ıĦğöó ●
Ŀĩé ƌƕƊ .(21 IJùģř ) ƏİģĦħïƌ ōĪûĤáƨ Ÿ(8 IJùģř ) IJôĪĩöïƌƨ
ŸƧľò ŌĪĢĜöïƌ ƏİĪĦħê ƆƌĿãƊ ōáƨ (ńðƌƨ) "
" ŀðĿïİà IJóƖİğõïƌ Ŀçĭð
.IJóƖİğõïƌ IJĨùç Ɣİģñ ıõûà OFF őĦê IJíİğïƌ ƎƖƌƔƊ ōöá
.īìƏĩĘîèƅ ƊƅĸÞƃ Ņîæ īæĩĘèƅ ŅģěĕÚ ƚĩĝìƃ Ňé ĶçĥÚ ●
Ľí ƨƈ ƏİñİĪõïƌ ƦƌĽĤì ōöó ĽĤì ŸƎĽäŐïƌ ŌĪĢĜá ƆİĨâƈ IJóƖİğõïƌ ƞŀñ ōá ƌƕƊ •
.ƎĽäŐïƌ Ƨľò ʼnĦöá
.IJóƖİğõïƌ ƤƌĽõöæƌ ƨƈ őïƨĺƌ ƎĿħĦï IJóƖİğõïƌ ƤİåƔƊ Ľġà IJêİûïƌ ŅõŖƌ
(4 IJùģř )
īìƏĩĘîèƅ ƝĩÞƍƃ
AAA ƘİĤð LR03 IJóƖİğà 1
(IJĤìĿð ĿĪë)
IJóƖİğõïƌ ŇŖƨ ōá Ľí ŏñƈ Ŏð ĽîĬá
.ĻĪùĝïƌ Ƨİøáůİà
VQT4J73_RR-XS350_AR.indd 2
VQT4J73_RR-XS350_E_DU.indd 2
īĝåĸĠèƅ ƈĩĝòğĠèƅ
ǀƸŮǍƯŽȚ ǀưƴŽȚ
1 Druk op [MENU].
2 Druk op u, i om “DATE” te selecteren
en bevestig met [q OK].
3 Druk op +, – om “
druk op i.
4 Druk op +, – om “
en druk op i.
5 Druk op +, – om “
druk op i.
NEDERLANDS
De klok instellen
7 Druk op +, – om het uur in te stellen en
druk op i.
VQT4J73_RR-XS350_E_DU.indd 3
Microfoonpositie
Aanbevolen gebruik
VQT4J73_RR-XS350_E_DU.indd 4
NEDERLANDS
Stoppen:
Druk op [STOP g/RETURN].
VQT4J73_RR-XS350_E_DU.indd 5
3 Druk op u, i om “
en bevestig met [q OK].
VQT4J73_RR-XS350_E_DU.indd 6
1 Druk op [MENU].
1 Druk op [MENU].
2 Druk op u, i om “MODE” te selecteren
en bevestig met [q OK].
3 Druk op +, – om “PCM”, “XP”, “LP” of
“SLP” te selecteren en bevestig met
[q OK].
2 Druk op u, i om “ ” te selecteren en
bevestig met [q OK].
(De fabrieksinstelling is “XP”.)
3 Druk op +, – of om “
selecteren.
NEDERLANDS
VQT4J73_RR-XS350_E_DU.indd 7
VQT4J73_RR-XS350_E_DU.indd 8
: SD-kaart
: Intern geheugen
NEDERLANDS
VQT4J73_RR-XS350_E_DU.indd 9
VQT4J73_RR-XS350_E_DU.indd 10
NEDERLANDS
VQT4J73_RR-XS350_E_DU.indd 11
Druk op [STOP g/RETURN] om de instelling
eerder te stoppen.
VQT4J73_RR-XS350_E_DU.indd 12
1 Druk op [MENU].
2 Druk op u, i om “NC” te selecteren en
bevestig met [q OK].
3 Druk op +, – om het soort ruisonderdrukking
te selecteren en bevestig met [q OK].
(De fabrieksinstelling is “OFF”.)
Sterke ruisonderdrukking.
Matige ruisonderdrukking.
Instelling
OFF
NEDERLANDS
Weergave met ruisonderdrukking (NOISE CANCEL)
VQT4J73_RR-XS350_E_DU.indd 13
VQT4J73_RR-XS350_E_DU.indd 14
VQT4J73_RR-XS350_E_DU.indd 15
NEDERLANDS
2 Druk op [MENU].
3 Druk op u, i om “DIV” te selecteren en
bevestig met [q OK].
4 Druk op +, – om “
bevestig met [q OK].
Stevig
insteken.
Type stekker:
ø 3,5 mm stereoministekker
VQT4J73_RR-XS350_E_DU.indd 16
Stevig
insteken.
Type stekker:
ø 3,5 mm
stereoministekker
Audioapparaat
Naar audiouitgang
(koptelefoon)
NEDERLANDS
VQT4J73_RR-XS350_E_DU.indd 17
Stevig
insteken.
VQT4J73_RR-XS350_E_DU.indd 18
IBM PC/AT-compatibel, Macintosh
• Microsoft® Windows® XP Home Edition/Professional en Service Pack 2,
Service Pack 3
• Microsoft® Windows Vista® Home Basic/Home Premium/Business/
Vooraf
Ultimate en Service Pack 1, Service Pack 2
geïnstalleerde versie
• Microsoft® Windows® 7 Starter/Home Basic/Home Premium/Professional/
Ultimate en Service Pack 1
NEDERLANDS
Systeemvereisten
Intern geheugen
VQT4J73_RR-XS350_E_DU.indd 19
VQT4J73_RR-XS350_E_DU.indd 20
NEDERLANDS
Onderhoud en gebruik
VQT4J73_RR-XS350_E_DU.indd 21
Onderhoud en gebruik
VQT4J73_RR-XS350_E_DU.indd 22
• Maak gebruik van de meegeleverde of
aanbevolen hoofdtelefoons of oortelefoons.
Gebaseerd op EN 50332-2:2003
1) Maximale uitgangsspanning
(oortelefoonuitgang): 150mV
2) Voor breedband kenmerkende spanning
(oortelefoon): 75mV
NEDERLANDS
VQT4J73_RR-XS350_E_DU.indd 23
VQT4J73_RR-XS350_E_DU.indd 24
NEDERLANDS
VQT4J73_RR-XS350_E_DU.indd 25
VQT4J73_RR-XS350_E_SW.indd 26
SVENSKA
VQT4J73_RR-XS350_E_SW.indd 27
STEREO
Fungerar som en vanlig
stereomikrofon.
VQT4J73_RR-XS350_E_SW.indd 28
Justering av volymen
SVENSKA
Varje tryck: Paus
VQT4J73_RR-XS350_E_SW.indd 29
VQT4J73_RR-XS350_E_SW.indd 30
SVENSKA
VQT4J73_RR-XS350_E_SW.indd 31
VQT4J73_RR-XS350_E_SW.indd 32
: SD-kort
: Internt minne
SVENSKA
VQT4J73_RR-XS350_E_SW.indd 33
VQT4J73_RR-XS350_E_SW.indd 34
SVENSKA
VQT4J73_RR-XS350_E_SW.indd 35
VQT4J73_RR-XS350_E_SW.indd 36
Effekt
SVENSKA
VQT4J73_RR-XS350_E_SW.indd 37
VQT4J73_RR-XS350_E_SW.indd 38
SVENSKA
VQT4J73_RR-XS350_E_SW.indd 39
VQT4J73_RR-XS350_E_SW.indd 40
SVENSKA
VQT4J73_RR-XS350_E_SW.indd 41
VQT4J73_RR-XS350_E_SW.indd 42
SVENSKA
Operativsystem
IBM PC/AT-kompatibla maskiner, Macintosh
VQT4J73_RR-XS350_E_SW.indd 43
VQT4J73_RR-XS350_E_SW.indd 44
SVENSKA
VQT4J73_RR-XS350_E_SW.indd 45
VQT4J73_RR-XS350_E_SW.indd 46
SVENSKA
VQT4J73_RR-XS350_E_SW.indd 47
VQT4J73_RR-XS350_E_SW.indd 48
SVENSKA
VQT4J73_RR-XS350_E_SW.indd 49
VQT4J73_RR-XS350_E_DA.indd 50
1 Tryk på [MENU].
VQT4J73_RR-XS350_E_DA.indd 51
VQT4J73_RR-XS350_E_DA.indd 52
1 Tryk på [REC *]. (Optagelse starter.)
Hvert tryk: Pause
Afspilning
1 Tryk på [q OK]. (Afspilning starter.)
Hvis der skal stoppes:
Tryk på [STOP g/RETURN].
VQT4J73_RR-XS350_E_DA.indd 53
1 Tryk på [ERASE/A-B&].
• Du kan annullere sletningen ved at trykke på [ERASE/
A-B&] igen eller trykke på [STOP g/RETURN].
VQT4J73_RR-XS350_E_DA.indd 54
VQT4J73_RR-XS350_E_DA.indd 55
1 Tryk på [MENU].
VQT4J73_RR-XS350_E_DA.indd 56
: SD-kort
: Intern hukommelse
VQT4J73_RR-XS350_E_DA.indd 57
(blinker) vises.
3 Tryk på [q OK].
VQT4J73_RR-XS350_E_DA.indd 58
6 Tryk på [ERASE/A-B&] på slutpunktet (B).
1 Tryk på [MENU].
VQT4J73_RR-XS350_E_DA.indd 59
VQT4J73_RR-XS350_E_DA.indd 60
Type
OFF
VQT4J73_RR-XS350_E_DA.indd 61
VQT4J73_RR-XS350_E_DA.indd 62
2 Tryk på u, i, når “
3 Filer i mapper
VQT4J73_RR-XS350_E_DA.indd 63
”, og tryk
VQT4J73_RR-XS350_E_DA.indd 64
1 Skub knappen LINE/MIC til [LINE].
2 Tryk på [MENU].
VQT4J73_RR-XS350_E_DA.indd 65
VQT4J73_RR-XS350_E_DA.indd 66
VQT4J73_RR-XS350_E_DA.indd 67
IBM PC/AT-kompatible maskiner, Macintosh
Computer
■ Første gang du tilslutter apparatet til din PC
VQT4J73_RR-XS350_E_DA.indd 68
VQT4J73_RR-XS350_E_DA.indd 69
VQT4J73_RR-XS350_E_DA.indd 70
VQT4J73_RR-XS350_E_DA.indd 71
VQT4J73_RR-XS350_E_DA.indd 72
-Hvis du ser dette symbol-
VQT4J73_RR-XS350_E_DA.indd 73
VQT4J73_RR-XS350_E_PL.indd 74
POLSKI
VQT4J73_RR-XS350_E_PL.indd 75
VQT4J73_RR-XS350_E_PL.indd 76
POLSKI
VQT4J73_RR-XS350_E_PL.indd 77
POLSKI
VQT4J73_RR-XS350_E_PL.indd 79
VQT4J73_RR-XS350_E_PL.indd 80
POLSKI
VQT4J73_RR-XS350_E_PL.indd 81
VQT4J73_RR-XS350_E_PL.indd 82
POLSKI
VQT4J73_RR-XS350_E_PL.indd 83
VQT4J73_RR-XS350_E_PL.indd 84
Typ
OFF
POLSKI
VQT4J73_RR-XS350_E_PL.indd 85
VQT4J73_RR-XS350_E_PL.indd 86
POLSKI
VQT4J73_RR-XS350_E_PL.indd 87
VQT4J73_RR-XS350_E_PL.indd 88
POLSKI
VQT4J73_RR-XS350_E_PL.indd 91
POLSKI
Komputer
VQT4J73_RR-XS350_E_PL.indd 92
POLSKI
VQT4J73_RR-XS350_E_PL.indd 93
VQT4J73_RR-XS350_E_PL.indd 94
POLSKI
VQT4J73_RR-XS350_E_PL.indd 95
VQT4J73_RR-XS350_E_PL.indd 96
POLSKI
VQT4J73_RR-XS350_E_PL.indd 97
“ (rok) a
Pokud je vybrána SD karta, na obrazovce bude
zobrazen údaj „SD“.
Poloha mikrofonu
VQT4J73_RR-XS350_E_CZ.indd 102
VQT4J73_RR-XS350_E_CZ.indd 108
VQT4J73_RR-XS350_E_CZ.indd 111
VQT4J73_RR-XS350_E_CZ.indd 112
Ke konektoru
výstupu audia
(sluchátka)
Ke konektoru
LINE OUT
(výstup audia)
VQT4J73
VQT4J73_RR-XS350_E_CZ.indd 113
• Microsoft® Windows® XP Home Edition/Professional a Service Pack 2,
Service Pack 3
• Microsoft® Windows Vista® Home Basic/Home Premium/Business/
Ultimate a Service Pack 1, Service Pack 2
Operační systém
• Microsoft® Windows® 7 Starter/Home Basic/Home Premium/
Professional/Ultimate a Service Pack 1
VQT4J73_RR-XS350_E_CZ.indd 119
-Pokud uvidíte tento symbol-
按 [STOP g/RETURN]。
VQT4J73_RR-XS350_E_CS.indd 125
1 按 [ERASE/A-B&]。
• 要取消删除时，再次按 [ERASE/A-B&] 或按
[STOP g/RETURN]。
VQT4J73_RR-XS350_E_CS.indd 126
4 按 [q OK] 确定。
VQT4J73_RR-XS350_E_CS.indd 127
3 按 [q OK]。
VQT4J73_RR-XS350_E_CS.indd 130
VQT4J73_RR-XS350_E_CS.indd 131
从指定位置播放
(TIME SEARCH)
1 播放期间按 [MENU]。
VQT4J73_RR-XS350_E_CS.indd 132
VQT4J73_RR-XS350_E_CS.indd 133
VQT4J73_RR-XS350_E_CS.indd 134
”时按u 、i。
VQT4J73_RR-XS350_E_CS.indd 135
3 按i直到出现 “
[q OK] 确定。
IBM PC/AT 兼容机，Macintosh
• Microsoft® Windows® XP 家庭版/ 专业版和 Service Pack 2、Service
Pack 3
• Microsoft® Windows Vista® 家庭普通版/ 家庭高级版/ 商用版/ 旗舰版和
Service Pack 1、Service Pack 2
• Microsoft® Windows® 7 简易版/ 家庭普通版/ 家庭高级版/ 专业版/ 旗舰版
和 Service Pack 1
• Mac OS X 10.2.8 - 10.7
接口
USB端口（如果使用USB集线器，将不能保证正常工作。）
∗ 即使满足此文档中所提的系统要求，也可能无法在某些个人电脑上使用。
∗ (Macintosh) 该软件使用操作系统的标准驱动器运行。
∗ 仅保证在兼容操作系统上的操作。
∗ 不保证在升级操作系统上的操作。
∗ 不保证在自制电脑上的操作。
∗ 使用 Windows Media® Player 时，电脑必须满足 Windows Media® Player 的系统要求。 有关 Windows Media® Player 详
情，请咨询微软公司。
∗ Microsoft、Windows、Windows Media 和 Windows Vista 是微软公司在美国和其他国家的注册商标或商标。
∗ 经 Fraunhofer IIS 和 Thomson 授权的 MPEG Layer-3 音频编码技术。
∗ IBM 和 PC/AT 是美国国际商业机器公司的注册商标。
∗ Macintosh 和 Mac OS 是 Apple Inc. 的商标。
∗ 出现在本文档中的其它系统名和产品名通常是各开发商公司的注册商标或商标。 请注意在本资料中没有标注 ™标记和® 标
记。
∗ 在有的电脑环境下可能会发生故障（例如不能使用本机上录制的音频数据等）。 除了故意或严重疏忽之外，Panasonic 和
Panasonic 经销商对于任何音频数据的丢失或者其它直接或间接损失不承担责任。
VQT4J73_RR-XS350_E_CS.indd 139
VQT4J73_RR-XS350_E_CS.indd 140
VQT4J73_RR-XS350_E_CS.indd 142
VQT4J73_RR-XS350_E_CS.indd 143
VQT4J73_RR-XS350_E_CS.indd 144
VQT4J73_RR-XS350_E_CS.indd 145
‫ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﻤﻊ ﺑﺼﻮﺕ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ ﺃﻭ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺫﻥ‪ .‬ﻳﻨﺼﺢ ﺧﺒﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺑﻌﺪﻡ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮﺓ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺍﺕ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺷﻌﺮﺕ ﺑﻄﻨﻴﻦ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺫﻧﻴﻚ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺧﻔﺾ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻗﻴﺎﺩﺓ ﺳﻴﺎﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺎﺩﺙ ﻣﺮﻭﺭﻱ ﻭﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺨﺎﻟﻒ ﻟﻠﻘﺎﻧﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻛﺜﻴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﻮﺧﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻎ ﺍﻟﺤﻴﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺤﺬﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺆﻗﺘﹰﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺤﺘﻤﻞ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺧﻄﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﻟﻮ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ ﺃﻭ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺫﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﻮﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻤﻢ ﻟﺘﻤﻜﻴﻨﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺳﻤﺎﻉ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﺮﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﻋﺎ ﹴﻝ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﻨﺪﻩ ﺳﻤﺎﻉ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻄﺔ ﺑﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻠﻘﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺗﺪﺍﺧﻼ ﹰ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﹰﺎ ﺳﺒﺒﻪ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻟﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺍﺿﺤﺎ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺮﺟﺎﺀ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺍﺧﻞ‬
‫ﹰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻠﺔ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻭﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬
‫• ﺧﻄﺮ ﺍﻻﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﻟﻬﺎ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﻪ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺮﺟﺎﺀ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﻠﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﻛﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﻳﺐ ﻣﻨﻚ ﻭﺍﻃﻠﺐ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺨﻠﺺ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺗﺴﺨﺖ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﻋﺼﺮ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﻗﻤﺎﺵ ﻣﺮﻃﺒﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺎﺀ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻣﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻻﺗﺴﺎﺥ ﻭﻧﻈﻔﻪ ﺑﻘﻄﻌﺔ ﻗﻤﺎﺵ ﺟﺎﻓﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﺤﺎﻟﻴﻞ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﺰﻳﻦ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺜﻨﺮ )ﻣﺮﻗﻖ ﺍﻟﻄﻼﺀ( ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻜﺤﻮﻝ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻨﻈﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺒﺦ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻨﺎﺩﻳﻞ ﻛﻴﻤﻴﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺸﻮﻩ ﺍﻟﻐﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺴﺎﻗﻂ ﺍﻟﻄﻼﺀ‪.‬‬
‫‪VQT4J73‬‬
‫‪5/30/2012 6:07:20 PM‬‬
‫‪ g‬ﺗﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪SD‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ microSD‬ﻭﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ microSDHC‬ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪microSD‬‬
‫ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﻛﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪) .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﹰ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ (.microSDHC‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻻ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ‪ SD‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﺴﺢ‬
‫ﻭﺃﻳﻀﺎ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬
‫ﹰ‬
‫ﱠ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻻ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ microSDHC‬ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺤﺜﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ .SD‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ ،SD‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻭﻻ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﻣﺴﺤﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪.SD‬‬
‫‪ g‬ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺒﻪ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻃﺮﻑ‬
‫ﺁﺧﺮ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SD‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻤﺖ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻭﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SD‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﻢ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﻼ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺇﻻ ﺃﻥ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻻ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﺴﺤﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻟﺪﻭﺍﻋﻲ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻣﺴﺢ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺎ ﹰ ﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺃﻭ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SD‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ ﺍ‪‬ﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻻﲢﺎﺩ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﻭﺑﻲ‬
‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺳﺎﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻌﻮﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺤﺎﺩ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﻭﺑﻲ‬
‫ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺭﻏﺒﺖ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﹸﺘﹶﺞ‪ ،‬ﻳﹸﺮﺟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﻠﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺯﻉ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺴﺆﺍﻝ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻨﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪VQT4J73‬‬
‫‪5/30/2012 6:07:20 PM‬‬
‫‪VQT4J73_RR-XS350_AR.indd 38‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺮ ﺗﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ‬
‫ﻛﺒﻼﺕ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻷﺫﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺳﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻛﺒﻞ ﻻ ﻳﺘﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﻃﻮﻟﻪ ‪ 3‬ﺃﻣﺘﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪ g‬ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫• ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺿﻌﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﺘﻔﺎﺩﻱ ﺗﻠﻒ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﻌﺮﺿﻪ ﻟﻠﻤﻄﺮ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺀ ﺃﻭ ﺳﻮﺍﺋﻞ‬
‫ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻻ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺎﺯﻝ ﻣﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺴﻲ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﻀﻊ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻐﻨﻄﺔ‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﻓﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﻫﺎﺏ ﻭﺍﻹﻳﺎﺏ ﺑﻮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻣﻴﺔ( ﺃﻭ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺗﺘﺄﺛﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺠﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ g‬ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﺸﻂ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻭﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻬﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ‬
‫ﻃﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻏﻄﺎﺅﻫﺎ ﻣﻘﺸﻮ ﹰ‬
‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﺤﺎﺫﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺒﻴﻦ ( ﻭ ) ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻧﺰﻉ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﻌﺘﺰﻡ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﺯﻣﻨﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﺴﺨﻨﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻬﺐ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﺘﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺳﻴﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﻌﺮﺿﺔ ﻟﻀﻮﺀ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬
‫ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﺯﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻷﺑﻮﺍﺏ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﻮﺍﻓﺬ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺳﻮﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺴﺮﺏ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺋﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻟﻴﺘﻲ ﻣﻤﺎ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻼﻣﺴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺋﻞ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺪ‬
‫ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻧﺸﻮﺏ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ‪ .‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﺴﺮﺏ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻟﻴﺘﻲ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺳﺘﺸﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺋﻊ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻼﻣﺲ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻟﻴﺘﻲ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻱ‬
‫ﺟﺰﺀ ﻣﻦ ﺟﺴﺪﻙ ﺍﻏﺴﻠﻪ ﺟﻴﺪﺍ ﹰ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﻴﺪﺍ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻭﻝ ﺃﻳﺪﻱ ﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ‬
‫• ﺍﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ‪AAA LR03‬‬
‫ﹰ‬
‫ﻟﺘﻔﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﺑﺘﻼﻋﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﺑﺘﻼﻉ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﺿﺮﺍﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻌﺪﺓ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻷﻣﻌﺎﺀ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺣﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﻴﺐ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻴﺒﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺿﻌﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺳﻮﻳﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺃﺷﻴﺎﺀ ﻣﻌﺪﻧﻴﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻼﺩﺓ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﻼﻣﺴﻬﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻷﺷﻴﺎﺀ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺪﻧﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺩﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﻗﺼﺮ ﻣﻤﺎ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻧﺸﻮﺏ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺣﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻠﺒﺔ ﺣﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪VQT4J73‬‬
‫‪5/30/2012 6:07:20 PM‬‬
‫‪VQT4J73_RR-XS350_AR.indd 37‬‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺮﺍﻗﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ OFF :‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫‪ 2‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺧﺮﻭﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ )ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪ ،11 :‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬
‫ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪(٪100 :‬‬
‫‪5/30/2012 6:07:20 PM‬‬
‫ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ‬
‫)‪ -10‬ﺩﻳﺴﺒﻞ‪ ،‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‬
‫)ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺳﺎﻥ ] [ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪(.‬‬
‫‪ ø 3.5‬ﻣﻢ‪ 16 ،‬ﺃﻭﻡ‪،‬‬
‫ﺣﺪ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ‪ 6 + 6‬ﻣﻴﻠﻠﻲ ﻭﺍﻁ‬
‫‪ ø 20‬ﻣﻢ‪ 8 ،‬ﺃﻭﻡ‪،‬‬
‫ﺣﺪ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ‪ 90‬ﻣﻴﻠﻠﻲ ﻭﺍﻁ )‪(RMS‬‬
‫‪ ø 3.5‬ﻣﻢ‪،‬‬
‫‪ 1.26‬ﻣﻠﻠﻲ ﻓﻮﻟﺖ ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫‪VQT4J73‬‬
‫‪USB‬‬
‫‪5/30/2012 6:07:21 PM‬‬
‫‪VQT4J73_RR-XS350_AR.indd 35‬‬
‫• ﻫﻞ ﺗﻤﺖ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SD‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﺇﻟﺦ؟ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺘﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪ ) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(8‬‬
‫• ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SD‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪ .‬ﺃﻭﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻭﺃﻋﺪ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ ) .SD‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(18‬‬
‫• ﺃﻧﺖ ﺗﺤﺎﻭﻝ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﻟﻠﻘﺮﺍﺀﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺑﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪) .‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ MP3‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﻧﻘﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻟﻠﻘﺮﺍﺀﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻢ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻣﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﻓﺮﻋﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ "‪ ،"MUSIC‬ﻓﻼ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺣﺬﻓﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺣﺬﻓﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ ) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(27‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻭﺻﻮﻻ ﹰ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﺑﺘﻘﺴﻴﻤﻪ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‪) .[STOP g/RETURN‬‬
‫ﻫﻞ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺣﻴﺰ ﻛﺎﻓﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ؟‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ 199‬ﻣﻠﻔﺎ ﹰ ﻣﺴﺠﻼ ﹰ )ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺣﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ 199‬ﻣﻠﻔﺎ ﹰ ﻣﺴﺠﻼﹰ‪ ،‬ﻓﻼ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﻣﻠﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻞ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺃﻗﺼﺮ ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ؟ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺑﻮﻗﺖ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺃﻃﻮﻝ‪ .‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺘﻴﻦ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎ ﹰ ﻟﺘﻘﺴﻴﻤﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪VQT4J73‬‬
‫‪5/30/2012 6:07:21 PM‬‬
‫‪VQT4J73_RR-XS350_AR.indd 34‬‬
‫• ﻫﻞ ﺗﻤﺖ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ؟ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ "‪ "MIC‬ﻭ "‪ "LINE‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻤﺖ ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺘﻬﺎ ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﹰ "ﻷﺳﻤﺎﺀ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪ ) ":‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (28‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﺣﺘﻰ ﻟﻮ ﻟﻢ ﺗﺘﻢ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔ ﻣﻠﻒ‪ ،‬ﻓﻼ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺭﻗﻤﻪ ﻫﻮ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﻧﻘﻠﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‬
‫‪ ) .MUSIC‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(30‬‬
‫• ﻭﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﺧﺎﻃﺌﺔ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻘﻮﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻣﺨﺰﻧﹰﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ )‪SD‬ـ‪ MIC (MIC‬ﺃﻭ )‪SD‬ـ‪،LINE (LINE‬‬
‫ﻓﻼ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ‪) .MUSIC‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻗﻮﺍﺱ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ ) (.SD‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(30‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‬
‫"‪ ،"MUSIC‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻭﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪ MP3‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪) PCM‬ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪(WAV‬‬
‫ﱠ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻣﺜﻞ ‪.WMA/AAC‬‬
‫• ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ "‪ ،"MUSIC‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.29‬‬
‫ﻣﻠﻔﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﻭﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪) .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ‬
‫• ﻓﻲ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ "‪ ،"MUSIC‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 199‬ﹰ‬
‫ﻣﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﻓﺮﻋﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻘﻞ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻓﻰﺀ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺅﻫﺎ‪ (.‬ﻭﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻘﻮﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺰﻳﺪ ﻋﺪﺩﻫﺎ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺗﻢ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(15‬‬
‫• ﻓﻲ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ "‪ ،"MUSIC‬ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﻟﻠﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 999‬ﻣﻠﻒ‪ ) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(20‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ( ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ 111‬ﻣﻠﻒ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ ﻟﻠﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺳﻊ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺭﺑﻤﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻗﺪ ﻧﻔﺪﺕ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﻮﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪) .‬‬
‫‪VQT4J73‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪) ALL REPEAT‬‬
‫‪5/30/2012 6:07:21 PM‬‬
‫‪VQT4J73_RR-XS350_AR.indd 33‬‬
‫" ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ • .‬ﺭﺑﻤﺎ ﺃﺻﺒﺤﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺑﻄﻴﺌﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻨﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻴﺎ ﹰ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ ) .SD‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(8‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SD‬ﺧﺎﺻﺘﻚ ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﹰ ﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻨﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻌﺔ ﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎ‪ ) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(18‬‬
‫ﻟﻘﺪ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SD‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻤﺖ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺘﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪،‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﻘﻴﻖ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻷﻣﺜﻞ ﻟﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺘﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪ ) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(8‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺗﺼﻨﻴﻊ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SD‬ﺃﻭ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪.SD‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻧﻬﺎ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﻭﻓ ﹰﻘﺎ ﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻨﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻌﺔ ﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎ‪،‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫‪http://panasonic.net/support/‬‬
‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺸﻂ )‪ (VAS‬ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(12‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻤﺴﺖ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺑﻴﺪﻙ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﺷﻲﺀ ﻣﺎ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺿﺎﺀ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻓﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﻣﻼﻣﺴﺔ ﺃﻱ ﺷﻲﺀ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪5/30/2012 6:07:21 PM‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﻮﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺑﻌﻴﺪﺍ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻇﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫• ﺍﺧﻔﺾ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ) ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (11‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﻞ‬
‫ﹰ‬
‫ﹰ‬
‫‪ LOW CUT FILTER‬ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ) ON‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (11‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻞ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺣﻴﺰ ﻛﺎﻓﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ؟‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ 199‬ﻣﻠﻔﺎ ﹰ ﻣﺴﺠﻼ ﹰ )ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺣﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ 199‬ﻣﻠﻔﺎ ﹰ ﻣﺴﺠﻼﹰ‪ ،‬ﻓﻼ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻨﺰﻋﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻡ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻟﻮ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺑﺪﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ‪ ،‬ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻭﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SD‬ﻭﺗﻤﺖ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SD‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺀ‪.‬‬
‫‪VQT4J73_RR-XS350_AR.indd 32‬‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﻃﻠﺐ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻓﺤﺺ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺷﻚ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻔﺤﺺ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺣﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻟﺤﻠﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ‪ ،‬ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﺸﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺯﻉ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫• ﺍﺧﻔﺾ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪ ) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(24 ،7‬‬
‫• ﺃﺑ ﹺﻖ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺫﻥ ﺑﻌﻴﺪﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪ ) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(24‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ‪ ،‬ﺃﺑ ﹺﻖ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺫﻥ ﺑﻌﻴﺪﺓ ﹰ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻫﻞ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺣﻴﺰ ﻛﺎﻓﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ؟‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ 199‬ﻣﻠﻔﺎ ﹰ ﻣﺴﺠﻼ ﹰ )ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺣﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ 199‬ﻣﻠﻔﺎ ﹰ ﻣﺴﺠﻼﹰ‪ ،‬ﻓﻼ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪VQT4J73‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺖ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺻﺪﻣﺔ )ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺳﻘﻮﻃﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ(‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﺰﺣﺰﺣﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻧﻔﺪﺕ ﺷﺤﻨﺘﻬﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺣﻴﺰ ﻣﺘﺒﻘﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪5/30/2012 6:07:21 PM‬‬
‫‪VQT4J73_RR-XS350_AR.indd 31‬‬
‫‪ .1‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‪ ،‬ﺃﻧﻘﺮ ﺑﺰﺭ ﺍﳌﺎﻭﺱ ﺍﻷﳝﻦ ﻭ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﻧﺴﺦ[‪.‬‬
‫ﻘﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻧﺰﻉ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SD‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫● ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﻄﻠ ﹰ‬
‫" "‪ ،‬ﻭﺇﻻ ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﺘﻠﻒ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻣﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﻓﺮﻋﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ‪ MUSIC‬ﻟﻨﻘﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻭﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻟﻼﻃﻼﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.29‬‬
‫● ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻟﻮ ﺗﻢ ﻧﻘﻠﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ‬
‫)‪SD‬ـ‪ MIC (MIC‬ﺃﻭ )‪SD‬ـ‪) .LINE (LINE‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻷﻗﻮﺍﺱ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪(.SD‬‬
‫‪ .2‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﳌﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ‪ MUSIC‬ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﺑﻬﺬﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﺑﺰﺭ ﺍﳌﺎﻭﺱ ﺍﻷﳝﻦ ﻭ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﻟﺼﻖ[ ﻟﻨﻘﻠﻪ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪VQT4J73‬‬
‫‪5/30/2012 6:07:21 PM‬‬
‫" ﺑﺎﻻﺳﻢ ‪ MIC‬ﻭ ‪ LINE‬ﻟﻠﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ )‪SD‬ـ‪ MIC‬ﻭ ‪SD‬ـ‪ LINE‬ﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ (SD‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫"ﻭ"‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ "‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ "‬
‫" ﺑﺎﻻﺳﻢ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ‪ MUSIC‬ﺇﻟﺦ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ‪MUSIC‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ‪ MIC‬ﻭ ‪ LINE‬ﻭ ‪ ) MUSIC‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(20‬‬
‫ﻳﹸﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ "‪ "DATA‬ﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺭﺅﻳﺔ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﻟﻜﻨﻪ ﻻ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫✽ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ‪ MUSIC‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﻧﻘﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ ، MP3‬ﺇﻟﺦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ‬
‫ﻣﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﻓﺮﻋﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ‪ .MUSIC‬ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‬
‫‪MUSIC‬‬
‫‪Music 01.MP3‬‬
‫‪Artist A‬‬
‫‪Music A.MP3‬‬
‫‪(SD‬‬
‫‪)memory‬ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫‪Internal‬‬
‫)‪(SD card‬‬
‫‪DATA‬‬
‫)‪LINE (LINE_SD‬‬
‫)‪MIC (MIC_SD‬‬
‫‪001_120920_1720V0.MP3‬‬
‫‪002_120925_0905V0.MP3‬‬
‫✽ ‪MUSIC‬‬
‫‪Album A1‬‬
‫‪Music A1-1.MP3‬‬
‫‪Album A2‬‬
‫‪Artist B‬‬
‫‪Album A2-1‬‬
‫"‪"TIMER‬‬
‫‪VQT4J73‬‬
‫"‪"T1‬‬
‫‪Meeting 01.MP3‬‬
‫"‪"T2‬‬
‫‪Meeting 02.MP3‬‬
‫"‪"VOICE‬‬
‫‪Conference 01.MP3‬‬
‫‪5/30/2012 6:07:21 PM‬‬
‫‪VQT4J73_RR-XS350_AR.indd 29‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ :‬ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ 20 :‬ﺳﺒﺘﻤﺒﺮ ‪/17:20 ،2012‬ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ‪MIC/MP3‬‬
‫‪ 1 001_120920_1720V0.MP3‬ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ )ﻣﻦ ‪ 001‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪(199‬‬
‫‪ 2 1‬ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ )ﺭﻗﻢ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﻳﺖ‪ 6 ،‬ﺃﺣﺮﻑ(‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3 45 6‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ )ﺭﻗﻢ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﻳﺖ‪ 4 ،‬ﺃﺣﺮﻑ(‬
‫)‪ 1‬ﺑﺎﻳﺖ( "_"‬
‫‪ 4‬ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ )‪ V‬ﺃﻭ ‪(L‬‬
‫‪ :V‬ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ‪MIC‬‬
‫‪ :L‬ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ‪LINE‬‬
‫‪ 5‬ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ )‪ 0‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ(‬
‫‪ 6‬ﺍﻣﺘﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ )‪(.MP3/.WAV‬‬
‫ﺭﻗﻤﺎ ﻣﺜﻞ ‪ 1‬ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻛﺎﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺳﺎﻟﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻟﻜﻦ ﹰ‬
‫‪001_120920_1720V0.MP3‬‬
‫‪002_121003_1233V0.MP3‬‬
‫‪003_121231_1915V0.MP3‬‬
‫‪001_120920_1720V0.MP3‬‬
‫‪002_120925_0905V0.MP3‬‬
‫‪003_121003_1233V0.MP3‬‬
‫‪004_121231_1915V0.MP3‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺷﺄﻥ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﻴﺮﺍﺩﻫﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﺇﺗﺎﺣﺔ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪) .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺃﺳﻤﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻓﻼ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪(.‬‬
‫ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺃﺳﻤﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺑﺤﺬﻑ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺇﻟﺦ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﺘﺸﺎﺑﻪ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺗﻬﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻤﺖ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺗﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺳﺒﻖ ﻭﺗﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﻴﺮﺍﺩﻫﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪،‬‬
‫ﻳﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ‪ ) .MUSIC‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(30‬‬
‫‪5/30/2012 6:07:22 PM‬‬
‫‪VQT4J73_RR-XS350_AR.indd 28‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻭﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SD‬ﻟﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺑﺎﻻﺳﻤﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ‪IC RECORDER :‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪IC REC SD :SD‬‬
‫‪‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻢ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SD‬ﻟﻢ ﺗﺘﻢ ﺻﻴﺎﻏﺘﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ]ﻗﺮﺹ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﻔﻚ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ[‪.‬‬
‫‪ .1‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﺑﺰﺭ‬
‫ﺍﳌﺎﻭﺱ ﺍﻷﳝﻦ ﻭ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﻧﺴﺦ[‪.‬‬
‫‪ .2‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﺑﺰﺭ ﺍﳌﺎﻭﺱ‬
‫ﺍﻷﳝﻦ ﻭ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﻟﺼﻖ[ ﻻﺱﺗﻴﺮﺍﺩﻩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪VQT4J73‬‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ]ﺳﺤﺐ ﻭﺇﺳﻘﺎﻁ[‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﻴﺮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﹰ‬
‫ﻘﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SD‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫● ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﻄﻠ ﹰ‬
‫" "‪ ،‬ﻭﺇﻻ ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﺘﻠﻒ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SD‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﻣﺘﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻫﻲ "‪ "MP3‬ﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻋﺒﺮ ‪ MP3‬ﻭ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ "‪ "WAV‬ﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﺒﺮ ‪.PCM‬‬
‫● ﻳﹸﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ "‪ "DATA‬ﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺭﺅﻳﺔ ﻫﺬﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﻟﻜﻨﻪ ﻻ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺃﺳﻤﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ )‪SD‬ـ‪SD) ،MIC (MIC‬ـ‪،LINE (LINE‬‬
‫‪ MUSIC‬ﺇﻟﺦ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻣﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ )‪SD‬ـ‪ MIC (MIC‬ﻭ )‪SD‬ـ‪ LINE (LINE‬ﻭ ‪ MUSIC‬ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺩﻣﺔ‪) .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬
‫ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻷﻗﻮﺍﺱ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪(.SD‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻤﺖ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺼﺒﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻤﻜﻨﺎ ﹰ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺨﺘﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ "‪ "MUSIC‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪5/30/2012 6:07:22 PM‬‬
‫‪VQT4J73_RR-XS350_AR.indd 27‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓﹰ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻛﺒﻞ ‪ USB‬ﻟﻺﻃﺎﻟﺔ‬
‫)ﻣﺮﻓﻖ(‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻛﺒﻼﺕ ‪ USB‬ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﻺﻃﺎﻟﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﻮﺻﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻷﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﻣﺪﺍﺩﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ "ﺍﻟﻌﺜﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ" ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺨﺘﻔﻲ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪VQT4J73‬‬
‫● ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ )ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﻨﺰﻉ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺑﺪﺀ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ )ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻀﻤﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻱ ‪ USB‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺑﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ )ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻭﺱ‬
‫ﻭﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ(‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﻭﺻﻞ ‪USB‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺒﻞ ﺗﻤﺪﻳﺪ ‪ USB‬ﺁﺧﺮ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺑﺪﺃﺕ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ )ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺩﺧﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻓﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻭﺃﻋﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻋﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺟﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ )ﺃﻧﻈﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪،[ ] :Windows XP‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻧﻘﺮﹰﺍ‬
‫ﹰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ‪ ([ ] :Windows 7 / Windows Vista‬ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻋﻠﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺰﺀ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺗﺒﻌﺎ ﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻨﺰﻉ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪) .‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ ﹰ‬
‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪(.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﻧﺰﻋﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪5/30/2012 6:07:22 PM‬‬
‫‪VQT4J73_RR-XS350_AR.indd 26‬‬
‫ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺷﺨﺼﻲ ‪ PC/AT‬ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻦ ‪ ،IBM‬ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ‪Macintosh‬‬
‫• ‪Microsoft® Windows® XP Home Edition/Professional‬‬
‫ﻭ‪Service Pack 3 ،Service Pack 2‬‬
‫• ‪Microsoft® Windows Vista® Home Basic/Home Premium/Business/Ultimate‬‬
‫ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﺳﺎﺑ ﹰﻘﺎ‬
‫ﻭ‪Service Pack 2 ،Service Pack 1‬‬
‫• ‪Microsoft® Windows® 7 Starter/Home Basic/Home Premium/Professional/Ultimate‬‬
‫ﻭ‪Service Pack 1‬‬
‫• ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ‪ 10.2.8‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 10.7‬ﻣﻦ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪Mac OS X‬‬
‫‪VQT4J73‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﻟﻮ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﻓﺎﺀ ﺑﻤﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺛﻴﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪ (Macintosh) ‬ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻓﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻀﻤﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻀﻤﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﻤﺖ ﺗﺮﻗﻴﺘﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻀﻤﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻮﻋﺔ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺟﻬﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪ Windows Media® Player‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺴﺘﻮﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻣﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ‪ .Windows Media® Player‬ﺍﻟﺮﺟﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ‪ Microsoft Corporation‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ‪.Windows Media® Player‬‬
‫‪ Microsoft ‬ﻭ‪ Windows‬ﻭ‪ Windows Media‬ﻭ‪ Windows Vista‬ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ‪Microsoft Corporation‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻻﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺪﺓ ﻭﺑﻠﺪﺍﻥ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ﻓﻚ ﺗﺸﻔﻴﺮ ‪ MPEG Layer-3 audio‬ﻣﺮﺧﺼﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ‪ Fraunhofer IIS‬ﻭ ‪.Thomson‬‬
‫‪ IBM ‬ﻭ‪ PC/AT‬ﻋﻼﻣﺘﺎﻥ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺘﺎﻥ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺘﺎﻥ ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ‪ International Business Machines Corporation‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻻﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ Macintosh ‬ﻭ‪ Mac OS‬ﻋﻼﻣﺘﺎﻥ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺘﺎﻥ ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ‪.Apple Inc‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺃﺳﻤﺎﺀ ﺍﻷﻧﻈﻤﺔ ﻭﺃﺳﻤﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺛﻴﻘﺔ ﻫﻲ ﺑﻮﺟﻪ ﻋﺎﻡ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺸﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ™ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ® ﻻ ﺗﻈﻬﺮﺍﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺛﻴﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺍﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩﹰﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻞ )ﻣﺜﻞ‪ :‬ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ .(.‬ﻻ ﻳﺠﻮﺯ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺘﺤﻤﻞ‬
‫‪ Panasonic‬ﺃﻭ ﺑﺎﺋﻌﻮ ‪ Panasonic‬ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺆﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺃﻱ ﻓﻘﺪﺍﻥ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﺃﻭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪ ،‬ﻣﺎ ﻋﺪﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻹﻫﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺠﺴﻴﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﻤﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪5/30/2012 6:07:22 PM‬‬
‫‪VQT4J73_RR-XS350_AR.indd 25‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺑﻀﻐﻂ ‪،+‬‬
‫–‪ ،‬ﻟﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻞ ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﺄﺛﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪5/30/2012 6:07:22 PM‬‬
‫ﻳﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﺰﺀ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺪ ﻳﺼﻌﺐ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ‬
‫ﻛﺜﻴﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺿﺎﺀ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺃﺫﻥ‬
‫ﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ )ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺮﻓﻘﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺫﻥ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻻ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‪.[STOP g/RETURN‬‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‪.[MENU‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ i ،u‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺑﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ )"‪ "BEEP‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫"‪ ("LED‬ﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‪ [q OK‬ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮﻝ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻣﺾ ﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﹰﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ – ،+‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‪[q OK‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‪.[STOP g/RETURN‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ "ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ"‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.4‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﻳﺼﺪﺭ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﻻ ﻳﺼﺪﺭ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻊ ﻫﻮ " "‪(.‬‬
‫● ﺣﺘﻰ ﻟﻮ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ " "‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﺼﺪﺭ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﺆﻗﺘﺎ ﹰ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺇﻣﺎ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺿﻮﺀ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ON‬ﺃﻭ ‪.OFF‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﻳﻀﻲﺀ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﻻ ﻳﻀﻲﺀ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻊ ﻫﻮ " "‪(.‬‬
‫● ﺣﺘﻰ ﻟﻮ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ "‪ "LED‬ﻋﻠﻰ " "‪ ،‬ﻳﻮﻣﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﻠﻒ‪.‬‬
‫‪VQT4J73_RR-XS350_AR.indd 24‬‬
‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ "‪ "LINE‬ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﺑﻤﻘﺒﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ‪/‬ﺧﻂ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻞ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻻ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‪.[STOP g/RETURN‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺤﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ‪ LINE/MIC‬ﺑﺎﺗﺠﺎﻩ ]‪.[LINE‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‪.[MENU‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ – ،+‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻂ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫]‪ [q OK‬ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‪.[STOP g/RETURN‬‬
‫ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺃﻥ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺧﻤﺴﺔ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺳﺘﺔ " "‪ ،‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﻟﻮ ﺗﻢ ﺭﻓﻊ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ‪.‬‬
‫ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺎﺕ ﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﻂ ﻣﻦ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫]‪ [STOP g/RETURN‬ﻭﺍﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ 2‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎﺀ ﻣﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻞ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺨﺮﺝ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭﻗﻒ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺻﻮﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻵﺧﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﺑﺒﺪﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻨﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻞ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﻗﺮﺃ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﱠ‬
‫● ﻓﺼﻞ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﻭﺭﺓ‪ ) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(10‬‬
‫● ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ "‪ "MIC‬ﺃﻭ "‪ "MUSIC‬ﻭ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺧﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻞ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ "‪ "LINE‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﹰﺎ ﻭ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺧﻂ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ "‪."LINE‬‬
‫‪VQT4J73‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻭﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻞ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺨﺮﺝ‪.‬‬
‫"‪ ،‬ﻓﻬﺬﺍ‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﻫﺘﺰ ﻣﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﺗﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ "‬
‫‪5/30/2012 6:07:23 PM‬‬
‫‪VQT4J73_RR-XS350_AR.indd 23‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﺑﻤﻘﺒﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ‪/‬ﺧﻂ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻞ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻻ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‪.[STOP g/RETURN‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻞ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﻗﺮﺃ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﱠ‬
‫ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺎ ﺃﻭ‬
‫● ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻌﺎ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ‪ ) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(11‬‬
‫ﹰ‬
‫ﹰ‬
‫● ﻻ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺑﻤﻘﺒﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ‪/‬ﺧﻂ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻞ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﻦ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ‬
‫ﱠ‬
‫‪5/30/2012 6:07:23 PM‬‬
‫‪VQT4J73_RR-XS350_AR.indd 22‬‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‪ [STOP g/RETURN‬ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻋﻨﺪﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‪.[MENU‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ i ،u‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ"‪ "DIV‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‪[q OK‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 4‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ – ،+‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ "‬
‫ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮﻝ‪.‬‬
‫" ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‪[q OK‬‬
‫ﻳﻮﻣﺾ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﺛﻢ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻠﻔﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻲ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ " "‪ ،‬ﻳﻜﺘﻤﻞ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ " " ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺴﻴﻢ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫]‪.[STOP g/RETURN‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ "‪."MUSIC‬‬
‫● ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺘﻴﻦ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﹰﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻟﺘﻘﺴﻴﻤﻪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺘﻪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻤﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﻌﻤﻞ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻧﺴﺨﻪ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎ ﹰ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‪ ،‬ﻳﺰﻳﺪ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺑﻤﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺧﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SD‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ‪ 199‬ﻣﻠ ﹰﻔﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ‪ ،‬ﻓﻼ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﻣﻠﻒ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺳﻤﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.28‬‬
‫‪VQT4J73‬‬
‫‪5/30/2012 6:07:23 PM‬‬
‫‪VQT4J73_RR-XS350_AR.indd 21‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ i ،u‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ "‬
‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ "‬
‫"‪ .‬ﻭﻻ ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ‪ ،‬ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﻟﻸﻣﺎﻡ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺟﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﻟﻠﺨﻠﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﹰ‬
‫‪VQT4J73‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﻫﺬﺍ‪،‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺨﻄﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪.i ،u‬‬
‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‪ [FOLDER‬ﻣﺮﺓﹰ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‪.[q OK‬‬
‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‪) .[STOP g/RETURN‬ﺍﻛﺘﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪(.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻫﻲ ﺃﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ‪MUSIC‬‬‫( ﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ‪MUSIC‬‬
‫( ﻭ ‪) LINE‬‬
‫ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ‪ ‬ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻏﻴﺮ ‪) MIC‬‬‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﺳﻤﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺘﻮﺑﺔ ﺑﺨﻂ ﻏﺎﻣﻖ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﻮﺻﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫) ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ ،(29‬ﻭﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﺳﻤﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺘﻮﺑﺔ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻗﻮﺳﻴﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺳﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ "‪ "MUSIC‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ‪ MUSIC‬ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﹰ‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ‪MUSIC‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ‪ ‬ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ‪ MIC‬ﻭ ‪ LINE‬ﻭ ‪MUSIC‬‬
‫ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻭﺟﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ‬‫ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﻧﻘﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ‬‫ﺳﺘﺘﺒﻊ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﺃﺳﻤﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻄﻠﺒﻪ‪ ) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(28‬‬‫ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻗﺪ‬
‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﻟﻠﻤﺠﻠﺪ )ﺗﻢ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺤﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ( ﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ‪‬ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ‪ MIC‬ﻭ ‪ LINE‬ﻭ ‪ MUSIC‬ﻭﺫﻟﻚ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﻟﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ‪.MUSIC‬‬
‫‪‬ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺃﻣﺜﻠﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ‪ MIC‬ﻭ ‪ LINE‬ﻭ ‪MUSIC‬‬
‫) ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(29‬‬
‫ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ )ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺑﺼﻴﻐﺔ ‪ MP3‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺑﺼﻴﻐﺔ ‪(PCM‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SD‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻣﺴﺠﻼﺕ ‪IC‬‬
‫ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪ Panasonic‬ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ SD‬ﻣﻊ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 1‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ‪ ،SD‬ﻭ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ "‪"MUSIC‬‬
‫) ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(5‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﻟﻠﻤﺠﻠﺪ )ﺗﻢ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺤﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ(‬
‫ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻏﻴﺮ‬‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ‬
‫)ﺃﻭ ﻧﻘﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ( ﺑﻌﺾ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺴﺘﺮﻳﻮ ﻣﻦ ‪ Panasonic‬ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺠﻬﺰﺓ‬
‫ﺑﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ‪.USB‬‬
‫‪5/30/2012 6:07:23 PM‬‬
‫(‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻣﻦ‬
‫● ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪ MP3‬ﻭﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪) PCM‬ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ (WAV‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ )‪ ،ID3 tag‬ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ( ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ "‪ "MUSIC‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 199‬ﻣﻠ ﹰﻔﺎ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻛﻞ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﻭﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻣﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﻓﺮﻋﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻘﻞ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻓﺊ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ‬
‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺅﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫)ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ"ﺑﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ"‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ‬
‫‪(.29‬‬
‫● ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ‪ MP3‬ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻴﺔ ﺑﺤﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻊ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ‪ MP3‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻟﻬﺎ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺑﺖ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻟﻜﻦ‬
‫ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻘﻀﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺽ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺖ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻣﻮﺍﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻊ ‪ A-B‬ﻋﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻨﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺑﺤﺠﻢ ‪ 2‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :ID3 tag‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ ﻭﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪.MP3‬‬
‫● ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ "‪ "MUSIC‬ﻟﻠﻤﺮﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﻮﻣﺾ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ "‬
‫" ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺣﻴﻦ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ "‪،"MUSIC‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ "‬
‫" ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺳﺘﺼﺒﺢ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻲ ﻣﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ‪.‬‬
‫‪VQT4J73‬‬
‫‪5/30/2012 6:07:24 PM‬‬
‫‪VQT4J73_RR-XS350_AR.indd 19‬‬
‫● ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻭﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SD‬ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫]‪ [FOLDER‬ﻷﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻒ‪.‬‬
‫) ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(5‬‬
‫● ﺗﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﻊ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ‪ 2 microSD‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻭﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ microSDHC‬ﻣﻦ ‪ 4‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 32‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ‪) .‬ﺍﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭﹰﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺁﻳﺎﺭ‪ /‬ﻣﺎﻳﻮ ‪(2012‬‬
‫● ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﻧﻊ ﺃﻭ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪.SD‬‬
‫● ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ‪ SD‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻧﻬﺎ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ‬
‫ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﻭﻓ ﹰﻘﺎ ﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻨﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻌﺔ ﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻋﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫‪http://panasonic.net/support/‬‬
‫● ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ "‪ "SD‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻭﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ ،SD‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻟﻢ ﺗﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ .SD‬ﺃﻭﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﺃﻋﺪ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪.SD‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﻴﺪﺍ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻭﻝ ﺃﻳﺪﻱ ﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ ﻟﺘﻔﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﺑﺘﻼﻋﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺣﻔﻆ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫ﹰ‬
‫● ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻭﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪.SD‬‬
‫‪VQT4J73‬‬
‫‪ 1‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﻓﺘﺢ ﻏﻄﺎﺀ‬
‫ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪/‬ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪.SD‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺪﻓﻊ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SD‬ﺑﺮﻓﻖ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺒﺮﺯ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SD‬ﻗﻠﻴﻼﹰ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ‬
‫ﹴ‬
‫ﺣﻴﻨﺌﺬ ﺑﺒﻂﺀ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺴﺤﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫‪5/30/2012 6:07:24 PM‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻻ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‪.[STOP g/RETURN‬‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‪.[MENU‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ i ،u‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ "‪ "NC‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‪[q OK‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ – ،+‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻮﻉ ‪ NOISE CANCEL‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫]‪ [q OK‬ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪OFF‬‬
‫‪LO‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫]‪.[STOP g/RETURN‬‬
‫● ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﻳﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ) ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ ،(14‬ﻓﻠﻦ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ‪.NOISE CANCEL‬‬
‫● ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺑﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ‪ 16‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮﻫﺮﺗﺰ‪ ،‬ﻓﻠﻦ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪.NOISE CANCEL‬‬
‫‪VQT4J73‬‬
‫‪5/30/2012 6:07:25 PM‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ i ،u‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ "ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ" ﻭ"ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻘﺔ" ﻭ"ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ" ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪،+‬‬
‫– ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‪ [MENU‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ [STOP g/RETURN‬ﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‪.[q OK‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺑﻀﻐﻂ ]‪ [MENU‬ﻭﺗﺒﻘﻪ‬
‫ﻣﻀﻐﻮﻃﹰﺎ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺘﻴﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﹰﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ‪ :‬ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻋﺎﺩﻱ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺗﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﻟﻠﻤﺠﻠﺪ "‪ "MIC‬ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ "‪ ،"LINE‬ﻻ ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻦ‬
‫" "‪ .‬ﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ "‪ ) "MUSIC‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ ،(29‬ﻳﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ )ﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 999‬ﻣﻠ ﹰﻔﺎ( ﺩﺍﺧﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪VQT4J73‬‬
‫‪5/30/2012 6:07:25 PM‬‬
‫‪VQT4J73_RR-XS350_AR.indd 16‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻠﻔﻈﻲ ﻫﻮ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻠﻔﻈﻲ ﻟﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻟﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻣﻼﺋﻤﺎ ﻟﻠﺘﻤﺮﻳﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻊ ‪) A-B‬ﻣﺜﺎﻝ( ﻭﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺻﻮﺕ )ﺗﻤﺮﻳﻦ(‪ .‬ﻳﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ‬
‫ﹰ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻟﺘﻌﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻻ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‪.[STOP g/RETURN‬‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‪.[MENU‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ i ،u‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ "‬
‫ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮﻝ‪.‬‬
‫" ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‪[q OK‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ – ،+‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ "‪ "On‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‪[q OK‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻠﻔﻈﻲ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻊ ﻫﻮ "‪(."OFF‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫]‪.[STOP g/RETURN‬‬
‫" )ﻣﻀﺎﺀ(‪ ،‬ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻠﻔﻈﻲ ﻭﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ‬
‫ﺗﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺪﻻﻟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ "‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ‪ A-B‬ﻭﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺻﻮﺕ‪ .‬ﺗﻀﻲﺀ ﺃﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻠﻔﻈﻲ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ‪ ،A-B‬ﻭﺗﻮﻣﺾ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺻﻮﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻠﻔﻈﻲ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]&‪ [ERASE/A-B‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪) .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﹰ‬
‫ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ]‪ u ،[STOP g/RETURN‬ﺃﻭ ‪(.i‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻠﻔﻈﻲ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ )‪ (A‬ﻭﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ )‪ (B‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺘﻴﻦ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﻞ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﹰﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ )‪ (A‬ﻭﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ ،‬ﺗﺼﺒﺢ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻫﻲ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ )‪ (B‬ﻭﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻠﻔﻈﻲ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻠﻔﻈﻲ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻠﻔﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫‪VQT4J73‬‬
‫‪5/30/2012 6:07:25 PM‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ i ،u‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• ‪ :i‬ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﻛﻞ ﺿﻐﻄﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• ‪ :u‬ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﻛﻞ ﺿﻐﻄﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﻔﺾ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﻤﺮﺍﺣﻞ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭﻫﺎ ‪ ٪10‬ﻟﺴﺮﻋﺎﺕ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ )‪ ،(٪100‬ﻭﺑﻤﺮﺍﺣﻞ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭﻫﺎ ‪ ٪5‬ﻟﺴﺮﻋﺎﺕ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ )‪.(٪100‬‬
‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‪ [STOP g/RETURN‬ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ )‪.(٪100‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‪.[q OK‬‬
‫● ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ ﻣﻤﻜﻨﹰﺎ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻓﻠﻦ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ‪.NOISE CANCEL‬‬
‫) ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(17‬‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ ،15‬ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]&‪ [ERASE/A-B‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪) .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﹰ‬
‫ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ‪ A-B‬ﺑﻀﻐﻂ ]‪ u ،[STOP g/RETURN‬ﺃﻭ ‪(.i‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻊ ‪ A-B‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ )‪ (A‬ﻭﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ )‪ (B‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺘﻴﻦ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﻞ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﹰﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ )‪ (A‬ﻭﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‪،‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﺒﺢ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻫﻲ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ )‪ (B‬ﻭﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻊ‬
‫‪.A-B‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻊ ‪ A-B‬ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻣﻠﻔﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫‪VQT4J73‬‬
‫‪5/30/2012 6:07:25 PM‬‬
‫‪VQT4J73_RR-XS350_AR.indd 14‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ )‪(TIMER RECORDING‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻻ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‪.[STOP g/RETURN‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SD‬ﻛﻮﺟﻬﺔ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SD‬ﺃﻭﻻ ﹰ‪.‬‬
‫) ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(18‬‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‪.[MENU‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ i ،u‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ " " ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‪[q OK‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ – ،+‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫‪.i‬‬
‫‪ 30 :‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺳﺎﻋﺘﺎﻥ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﻻ ﻳﺘﺒﻘﻰ ﺣﻴﺰ ﺧﺎﻟﻲ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ‬
‫‪ 4‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ – ،+‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﻭﻗﺖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.i‬‬
‫‪ 5‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ – ،+‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﻭﻗﺖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.i‬‬
‫‪ 6‬ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪ – ،+‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫]‪ [q OK‬ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪SD‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫]‪.[STOP g/RETURN‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ " "‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﺑﻤﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﻮﻣﺾ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ " " ﻭﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ " " ﻭﺗﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﻣﺾ " " ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺿﻐﻄﺖ ]‪ [STOP g/RETURN‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﻧﻘﻄﻌﺖ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺗﻨﻄﻔﺊ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻖ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻗﺒﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﺬﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪5/30/2012 6:07:26 PM‬‬
‫‪VQT4J73_RR-XS350_AR.indd 13‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺸﻂ(‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﺆﻗﺘﹰﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺕ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﻮﻥ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺘﻴﻦ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﹰﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﺒﺮ‬
‫ﹶ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ‪) VAS‬ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺭﺻﺪﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺻﻮﺗﹰﺎ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻻ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‪.[STOP g/RETURN‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‪.[MENU‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ i ،u‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ "‪ "VAS‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‪[q OK‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ – ،+‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ "‪ "On‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‪[q OK‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ i ،u‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ‪.VAS‬‬
‫)ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻊ ﻫﻮ "‬
‫"‪(.‬‬
‫● ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺭﺻﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﻦ ‪ 1‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.5‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺭﻓﻊ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ‪) VAS‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ‬
‫● ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻪ‬
‫ﹰ‬
‫ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻌﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺧﻔﺾ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ‪.VAS‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ(‪ .‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﹰ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫]‪.[STOP g/RETURN‬‬
‫ﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﺒﺮ ‪ ،VAS‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]* ‪.[REC‬‬
‫‪VQT4J73‬‬
‫● ﻟﻠﺘﺴﺠﻴﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪ VAS‬ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OFF‬‬
‫● ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ‪ LOW CUT FILTER‬ﻫﻲ ‪ ،ON‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻗﻄﻊ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﻭﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ‪ .VAS‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ‬
‫ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ‪ LOW CUT FILTER‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ) .OFF‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(11‬‬
‫● ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻮﻗﻔﺖ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﺆﻗﺘﹰﺎ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻮﻣﺾ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﻣﺆﺷﺮ"‪ "VAS‬ﻭﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻭﻣﺆﺷﺮ "*"‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]* ‪ [REC‬ﻣﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﻟﻠﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﻟﻠﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ ﻭﺳﺘﻀﻲﺀ "‪ "VAS‬ﺣﻴﻨﺌﺬ‪.‬ﹴ‬
‫‪5/30/2012 6:07:26 PM‬‬
‫‪VQT4J73_RR-XS350_AR.indd 12‬‬
‫ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﺗﺨﻔﻴﺾ ﺿﻮﺿﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ‬
‫ﻭﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻌﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ " " )ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ(‪.‬‬
‫ﹰ‬
‫ﻳﻜﻮﻥ‬
‫ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ " " )ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻊ(‪.‬‬
‫ﹰ‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻻ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‪.[STOP g/RETURN‬‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‪.[MENU‬‬
‫" ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‪[q OK‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ i ،u‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ "‬
‫ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮﻝ‪.‬‬
‫" ﺃﻭ "‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ – ،+‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ "‬
‫‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫]‪.[STOP g/RETURN‬‬
‫ﻳﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺧﻔﺾ ﺿﻮﺿﺎﺀ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻜﻴﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺀ‪ ،‬ﺇﻟﺦ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺟﺘﻤﺎﻉ‪ ،‬ﺇﻟﺦ‪(LOW CUT FILTER) .‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻻ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‪.[STOP g/RETURN‬‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‪.[MENU‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ – ،+‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ "‪ "On‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‪[q OK‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮﻝ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻊ ﻫﻮ "‪(."OFF‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫]‪.[STOP g/RETURN‬‬
‫‪VQT4J73‬‬
‫‪5/30/2012 6:07:26 PM‬‬
‫‪VQT4J73_RR-XS350_AR.indd 11‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻟﻠﻐﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻻ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‪.[STOP g/RETURN‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‪.[MENU‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ i ،u‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ "‪ "MODE‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫]‪ [q OK‬ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮﻝ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻛﻼ ﹰ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ )‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ – ،+‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ "‪ "PCM‬ﺃﻭ "‪ "XP‬ﺃﻭ "‪ "LP‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫"‪ "SLP‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‪ [q OK‬ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮﻝ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻊ ﻫﻮ "‪(."XP‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫]‪.[STOP g/RETURN‬‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(36‬‬
‫● ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ "‪ ،"SLP‬ﻳﺼﺒﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪VQT4J73‬‬
‫‪5/30/2012 6:07:27 PM‬‬
‫‪VQT4J73_RR-XS350_AR.indd 10‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ )‪(SCENE SELECT‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻼﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻻ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‪.[STOP g/RETURN‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‪.[MENU‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ i ،u‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ "‪ "SCENE‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫]‪ [q OK‬ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪ – ،+‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫]‪ [q OK‬ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮﻝ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻊ ﻫﻮ "‬
‫ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫]‪.[STOP g/RETURN‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﻐﻂ ]* ‪ ،[REC‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺗﻚ ﻟﻠﺘﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﻖ‪،‬‬
‫ﺇﻟﺦ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺃﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺃﺷﺨﺎﺹ ﺁﺧﺮﻳﻦ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻤﻘﺎﺑﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻻﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ‪،‬‬
‫ﺇﻟﺦ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻝ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺎﺿﺮﺍﺕ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻐﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﻴﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﺇﻟﺦ‪.‬‬
‫‪ON‬‬
‫‪ON‬‬
‫‪VQT4J73‬‬
‫" ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ، 3‬ﺗﻌﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓﹰ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻭﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺈﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ"‬
‫"‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺨﺘﻔﻲ ﺩﻻﻟﺔ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺎﺕ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﺗﺴﺘﺒﺪﻝ "‬
‫● ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻭﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ‪ LINE/MIC‬ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫]‪ ) [LINE‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(23‬‬
‫‪5/30/2012 6:07:27 PM‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻻ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‪.[STOP g/RETURN‬‬
‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺣﺬﻓﻪ‪ ) .‬ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺘﺎﻥ ‪ 5‬ﻭ ‪(7‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﻃﺮﻕ ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺍ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺣﺬﻓﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻠ ﹰﻔﺎ‬
‫‪:‬‬
‫ﹰ‬
‫ﺍﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ‪) .‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ‬
‫‪:‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻲ ﻻﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺣﺬﻓﻬﺎ(‬
‫‪ :‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺤﺬﻑ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻛﺎﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SD‬ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪) .‬ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ(‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]&‪.[ERASE/A-B‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ i ،u‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫]‪ [q OK‬ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮﻝ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﺑﺤﺬﻑ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ‬
‫" ﺃﻭ "‬
‫ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ "‬
‫" ﺑﺎﻟﺨﻄﺄ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ "‬
‫" ﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺬﻑ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪u‬‬
‫ﺃﻭ ‪ i‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ )‬
‫( ﺃﻭ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ ،( ) SD‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫]‪ [q OK‬ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪. 3‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ i ،u‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ "‬
‫]‪ [qOK‬ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻮﻣﺾ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺤﺬﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻋﺪﺓ ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﻜﺘﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﺬﻑ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ " "‪ ،‬ﻳﻜﺘﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺧﺘﺮ " " ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺤﺎﻭﻝ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ ،SD‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ "‬
‫"‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺣﺬﻓﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﻭﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻹﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﺒﻞ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺒﻘﻲ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﻛﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﺗﻨﺰﻉ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SD‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫( ﻭﺑﺤﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ )‬
‫● ﺑﺤﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ )‬
‫(‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ .‬ﺇﻻ ﺃﻧﻪ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﻟﻠﻘﺮﺍﺀﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﻧﻘﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺤﺬﻓﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ ) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(27‬‬
‫● ﻳﺘﻢ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻡ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ )‬
‫(‪.‬‬
‫‪5/30/2012 6:07:27 PM‬‬
‫‪VQT4J73_RR-XS350_AR.indd 8‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻻ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‪.[STOP g/RETURN‬‬
‫• ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ‪ ) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(5‬‬
‫• ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻠﻒ‪) .‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ(‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ i ،u‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻠﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‬
‫ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﻦ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.20‬‬
‫)ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻊ ﻫﻮ "‪(."12‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﻭﻗﻔﺖ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﻀﺒﻮﻃﹰﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ 17‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻧﻪ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ 16‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺩﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.i ،u‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ u‬ﻧﺼﻒ ﺿﻐﻄﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻭﺳﻴﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ u‬ﻓﻲ ﻏﻀﻮﻥ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﹰﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺟﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ )ﺑﺤﺚ(‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ i ،u‬ﻭﺃﺑﻘﻪ ﻣﻀﻐﻮﻃﹰﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‪.[STOP g/RETURN‬‬
‫‪VQT4J73‬‬
‫‪5/30/2012 6:07:28 PM‬‬
‫‪VQT4J73_RR-XS350_AR.indd 7‬‬
‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ ) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(3‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻻ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‪.[STOP g/RETURN‬‬
‫‪STEREO‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺣﺪﺍﺙ ﻣﺜﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺟﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺤﻀﺮﻫﺎ‬
‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﻛﺒﻴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺷﺨﺎﺹ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺣﺪﺍﺙ ﻣﺜﻞ‬
‫ﻣﺤﺎﺿﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ‬
‫ﻳﻨﺒﻌﺚ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺿﻐﻄﺖ ]‪ [MENU‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﻟﻠﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪،‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ ﻭﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻘﻀﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‪.[STOP g/RETURN‬‬
‫● ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﻛﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫) ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺘﺎﻥ ‪(11 ،10‬‬
‫● ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻻﺳﺘﺮﺟﺎﻉ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻟﻤﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﺸﻜ ﹴﻞ ﻣﺘﺰﺍﻣﻦ‪ ) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(9‬‬
‫● ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ‪ 2‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﺆﻗﺘﹰﺎ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ‪ 2‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﻳﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻭﻗﺘﻬﺎ ﺑﻤﻠﻒ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺷﻲﺀ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ )ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺘﻴﻦ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﹰﺎ( ﻣﺎ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ‬
‫ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻼﻣﺲ ﺇﺻﺒﻌﻚ ﺃﻭ ﺷﻲﺀ ﻣﺎ ﻣﻊ ﻫﺬﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺿﺎﺀ ﻋﺒﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫‪5/30/2012 6:07:28 PM‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻻ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‪.[STOP g/RETURN‬‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‪.[FOLDER‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ ،SD‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ "‪ "SD‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ(‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 199‬ﻣﻠ ﹰﻔﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ "‪ "MIC‬ﻭ"‪."LINE‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪SD‬‬
‫) ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ ،(18‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻣﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪.SD‬‬
‫‪‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺗﹸﻜﺘﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ microSD/microSDHC‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ "ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪."SD‬‬
‫● ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ "‪ "MUSIC‬ﻟﻠﻤﺮﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﻮﻣﺾ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ "‬
‫" ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪VQT4J73‬‬
‫‪5/30/2012 6:07:28 PM‬‬
‫‪VQT4J73_RR-XS350_AR.indd 5‬‬
‫• ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺮﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺀ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺘﻘﻞ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪. 3‬‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‪.[MENU‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ i ،u‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ "‪ "DATE‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫]‪ [q OK‬ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 6‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ – ،+‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫‪.i‬‬
‫" ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺑﻨﻈﺎﻡ ‪ 24‬ﺳﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭ "‬
‫‪ 7‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ – ،+‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.i‬‬
‫‪ 8‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ – ،+‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ – ،+‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ "‬
‫ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ i ،u‬ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫‪ – ،+‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻻﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 4‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ – ،+‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ "‬
‫‪ 5‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ – ،+‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ "‬
‫• ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.u‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫]‪.[STOP g/RETURN‬‬
‫‪VQT4J73‬‬
‫‪5/30/2012 6:07:28 PM‬‬
‫‪VQT4J73_RR-XS350_AR.indd 4‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﹰﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻧﻘﻀﺎﺀ ‪ 30‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﹰﺎ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺤﺐ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ‪ OPR/HOLD‬ﺑﺎﺗﺠﺎﻩ ]‪ [OFF‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻖ ‪ Hold‬ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺠﺎﻫﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻟﻮ ﺗﻢ ﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ )ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫"‬
‫"(‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻣﻨﻊ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺼﻮﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻖ ‪،Hold‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﹰﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪VQT4J73‬‬
‫‪5/30/2012 6:07:29 PM‬‬
‫‪VQT4J73_RR-XS350_AR.indd 3‬‬
Hold-functie
ƆİĨâƈ ƧİñƔƈ ŎĪõħïƌ ŐùĨïƌ őĦê IJĪĤõöħïƌ IJóƖİğõïƌ IJĨùç ƩŐöûð ƛĿê ōöó
.ƎĽäŐïƌ Ƨľò Ōħê
ńðƌƨ
" ŀðĿïƌ ńðŐó ŸIJóƖİğõïƌ IJĨùç Ɣİģñ IJïİä Œì ●
.Ŏĥħð ijíƨ ƍĿíƈ
" ŀðĿïƌ ĿĩĠó ŸIJóƖİğõïƌ IJĨùç Ɣİģñ ĽĨê ●
ŌĪĢĜá ʼníŐöóƨ "
.İƫĪŕİĤĦá IJíİğïƌ
Őï őöä ŸŏðƌĽúöæƌ ƔƌĿħïƌ ŌĪĢĜöïƌ ƩŐöùð ƨƈ IJóƖİğõïƌ IJïİä őĦê ƌƫ Ɣİħöêƌ ●
Ŏĥħħïƌ Ŏð ŸIJóƖİğõïƌ IJĨùç Ɣİģñ ıõûà IJíİğïƌ ŌĪĢĜá ơİĤóƊ ōá
Ľí Ÿŏñƈ ůƊ .ƩĿåƈ ƎĿð İĩĦĪĢĜá ōá ƌƕƊ ƎŀĪãƨ ƎĿöģï ƎĽäŐïƌ Ƨľò ƥƌĽúöæƌ
ƩŐöûð ƛİģúñƌ ıõûà ŌĪĢĜöïƌ ƆİĨâƈ įãİģð ŌĥĜà ƎĽäŐïƌ ơİĤóƊ ōöó
.IJóƖİğõïƌ IJĨùç
ƏİģĦħïƌ ơľùà ƥİĪĤïƌ ĽĨê IJóƖİğõïƌ IJĨùç Ŏð ŎĪġð ƩŐöûð ĿìŐá ıĦğöó ●
Ŀĩé ƌƕƊ .(21 IJùģř ) ƏİģĦħïƌ ōĪûĤáƨ Ÿ(8 IJùģř ) IJôĪĩöïƌƨ
ŸƧľò ŌĪĢĜöïƌ ƏİĪĦħê ƆƌĿãƊ ōáƨ (ńðƌƨ) "
" ŀðĿïİà IJóƖİğõïƌ Ŀçĭð
.IJóƖİğõïƌ IJĨùç Ɣİģñ ıõûà OFF őĦê IJíİğïƌ ƎƖƌƔƊ ōöá
.īìƏĩĘîèƅ ƊƅĸÞƃ Ņîæ īæĩĘèƅ ŅģěĕÚ ƚĩĝìƃ Ňé ĶçĥÚ ●
Ľí ƨƈ ƏİñİĪõïƌ ƦƌĽĤì ōöó ĽĤì ŸƎĽäŐïƌ ŌĪĢĜá ƆİĨâƈ IJóƖİğõïƌ ƞŀñ ōá ƌƕƊ •
.ƎĽäŐïƌ Ƨľò ʼnĦöá
.IJóƖİğõïƌ ƤƌĽõöæƌ ƨƈ őïƨĺƌ ƎĿħĦï IJóƖİğõïƌ ƤİåƔƊ Ľġà IJêİûïƌ ŅõŖƌ
(4 IJùģř )
īìƏĩĘîèƅ ƝĩÞƍƃ
IJíİğà/IJóƖİğõïƌ IJùöì Ɔİğë
SD
AAA ƘİĤð LR03 IJóƖİğà 1
(IJĤìĿð ĿĪë)
IJóƖİğõïƌ ŇŖƨ ōá Ľí ŏñƈ Ŏð ĽîĬá
.ĻĪùĝïƌ Ƨİøáůİà
VQT4J73_RR-XS350_AR.indd 2
VQT4J73_RR-XS350_E_DU.indd 2
īĝåĸĠèƅ ƈĩĝòğĠèƅ
ǀƸŮǍƯŽȚ ǀưƴŽȚ
EU
EU
Pursuant to at the directive 2004/108/EC, article 9(2)
Panasonic Testing Centre
Panasonic Marketing Europe GmbH
Winsbergring 15, 22525 Hamburg, Germany
Model No.
Web Site: http://panasonic.net
© Panasonic Corporation 2012
VQT4J73_RR-XS350-cover.indd 2
NEDERLANDS
SVENSKA
POLSKI
VQT4J73_RR-XS350-cover.indd 1
VQT4J73
M0512KZ0